Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . Finally. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Add basic MEP elements. and piping. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and plumbing engineering workflows. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. electrical. such as duct. Germany. electrical panels. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as mechanical equipment. fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Add more detailed modelling elements. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.

and tags. For example. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. you learn where the training files are located. However. So. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. to provide a richer and more finished design. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. such as templates and families. When you install the training files as instructed. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. however. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. is located and accessed in the training files location. Metric file names have an _m suffix. In this exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Create schedules. For example. After completing each exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. annotations. Metric: files for users working with metric units. templates. as well as how to open and save them. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. your Training folder may be in a different location. When you open a training file. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. you can choose to save your work. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. when you add ductwork. views. NOTE Depending on your installation. You do not design entire systems. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and sheets to document the project. On the Contents tab.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create detail views. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Imperial file names have an _i suffix.

rvt) is selected. the Open dialog displays. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt. enter the new file name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. scroll down. if you open settings. 4 Click the training file name. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 3 In the right pane. click ➤ Save As. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For File name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. verify that Project Files (*. you are prompted to save the changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 8 If you have made changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Open. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. For Files of type. double-click Imperial or Metric. and you can open any supported file type. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close.rvt and make changes. and click Save. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click the Training Files icon.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Accessing Training Files | 5 . select the folder in which to save the new file.

6 .

the floor or roof remains connected. hence. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and plans. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. schedules.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. 2D and 3D view. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the hierarchy of elements. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If the length of the elevation is changed. the door retains this relationship to the partition. drawing sheets. quantities. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition. In the Revit MEP model. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. As you work in drawing and schedule views. You learn the terminology. the operation of the software is parametric. In this case. and phases when you need it. and schedules required for a building project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. ■ ■ 7 . the parameter is one of association or connection. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. scope. drawings. sections. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. every drawing sheet.

View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They display in relevant views of the design. sprinklers. They help to describe or document the design. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. sinks. sinks. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. grids. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sprinklers. boilers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and electrical panels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. When you change something. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. levels. Examples include detail lines. tags. For example. filled regions. and electrical panels. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and reference planes are datum elements. Datum elements help to define project context. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ducts. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. dimensions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ducts. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. boilers. For example. dimensions.

The project file contains all information for the building design. and so forth). top of wall. floors. and ceilings. and types. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. or bottom of foundation. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. schedules. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. views of the project. Often. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw. However. Project: In Revit MEP. North . for example. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. section views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you can explicitly control them.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. from geometry to construction data. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. By using a single project file. first floor. you must be in a section or elevation view. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you do nothing to establish these relationships.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Most often. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. such as roofs. To place levels. For example. and drawings of the design. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. programming is not required. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. families. In other cases. elevation views. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.

showing. Type: Each family can have several types. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. With a few clicks. hiding. System families can be transferred between projects. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can also display several project views at one time. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. and similar graphical representation. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. A type can also be a style. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. identical use. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Unlike system and standard component families. For example. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. pipes. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. However. such as a 30” X 42” title block. System families include ducts. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Then experiment with them. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. For example. and wires. each in-place family contains only a single type. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A type can be a specific size of a family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. data and systems. select the tool first. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for editing existing elements. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and CAD files. architect-specific tools. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and for switching views. and settings. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . project and system parameters. When working on the Modify tab.

To keep a panel expanded. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides access to common tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. By default. closes the application menu (double-click). when adding duct. provides requested information.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu... (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. select a file to open. (Export) On the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Open) save the current drawing.

Camera. (Print) access product and license information. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. to. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. but is not enabled by default.On the application menu. click. publish the current project. saves a current project. family. and Walkthrough.. annotation. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. annotation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . provides views including Default 3D. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. or template file...

Modify. In addition. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. However. workshared components. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. When you are highlighting an element or component. Starting with the most recent command. or the Family Editor. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view.To undo or redo a series of operations. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Group. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. check the Status Bar. To show the Status Bar again. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clear the Status Bar check mark. This displays the command history in a list. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. when you switch to another editing mode. repeat the command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Clipboard. displaying the same information. When you are using a command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). To hide the Status Bar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . On the Quick Access toolbar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.To cancel or exit the current command. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. select one or more elements of the same category. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. for example.

rvt. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials. In the following steps. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

6 Click in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. on the Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. To modify or add snap increments. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click . When you release the mouse button. In the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. If you do not have a wheel mouse. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. the view zooms in on the selected area.

10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and then using the Zoom tool again. 14 To exit the wheel.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. For more information about SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. ➤ Options. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.

bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. called drag controls. and open Level 2 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Small blue dots. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. referred to as shape handles. display along the ends.Design. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . 2 Enter ZR. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you are familiar with these tasks. These are the drag controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and select the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. as shown. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.

click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).3 Click and drag the bottom control. Move. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu.

such as Move and Copy. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. In this case. click to specify the starting position. for example. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 11 With the duct already selected. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Some commands.

you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 13 To end a command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Select Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Press ESC twice. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For example. Click OK. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

select Project. click Training files. under Template file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. settings. such as ducts and pipes. such as coordination review and interference checking. 27 . and click Open. the default building levels and standard views.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You can choose from several templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. In that case. click Browse. New projects inherit all the families. 6 Click OK. use copy/monitor. You can either select a template from the template library. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise.rte template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. create and manage views. and geometry from the starting template. Finally. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. system families. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and modify system settings. under Create new. and loadable families. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. you learn how to start a project from a template. link files. 5 In the New Project dialog. such as the default project units and settings.

create another new project using the Construction template. select Manchester. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. If you want to use a template other than the default. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. for Energy Data. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. For example. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and open North. In the Choose Template dialog. Click Cancel. ■ For Building Construction. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. When you select the material. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Click OK twice. you can select it now. For Location. click Edit. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. for City. NH. 10 Using the same method. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 In the drawing area. select Project template. click Browse. under Energy Analysis. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. navigate to Imperial Templates. ■ ■ Under Create new.rte template and click Open. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. review the construction materials listed. select Level 1. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click (Browse). 18 In the Project Parameters dialog.7 In the Project Browser. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select School or University. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. (Browse). Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools.

Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and demand factors for electrical systems. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Identity Data. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and 12 1/2". click Rectangular. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. For Categories. select Views. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Click OK twice.rfa and click Open. click Sizes. 27 Click OK. 24 In the right pane. 11 1/2". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 4 1/2". wiring. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 25 In the left pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for 3 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. plumbing. click Wiring. 4 1/2". and 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3/4". 23 In the left pane. 26 In the right pane. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. under Pipe Settings. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. piping. power distribution systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. under Duct Settings. Holding CTRL. 33 Click OK. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 5 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and fire protection systems. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". 10 1/2". click Round. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane.

Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. and groups that are contained in a project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes.Origin to Origin. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. click Browse.rvt. 38 Close the file. From the Positioning list. families. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. You need to create the MEP model for the project. under Template file. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by. Linking Projects In this exercise. click Training. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. In addition. 5 Click OK. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Project. select Family and Type. For Sort by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. For Then by. Click Open. Select Ascending Click OK twice. To enable this coordination. 4 In the New Project dialog. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Sub-Discipline. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Associated Level. sheets. select Auto . select View Name. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and select it as the library path. Save. and click OK twice. click (Add Value). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click (Browse). click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. templates. and change the name to My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .11 In the Places dialog. click My Library. Load. and click Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 15 Under Library Name. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. ➤ Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.

such as bump maps. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. If you work in a large office. 3 Under Settings. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 9 In the text editor. specify the new location here. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you want to relocate this path. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. and decal image files. click Edit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 22 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 27 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click Edit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. custom color files. click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. This path is determined during installation. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Places. 21 On the File Locations tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. view the current path. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 11 In the Options dialog. 20 Click ➤ Options.

rte. under Dimension Snaps. 25 Close the file without saving it. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 4 In the New Project dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. work with snapping turned off. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. As you zoom in and out within a view.. you modify snap increments. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 22 In the text editor. delete sheetmtl-CU. 23 In the text editor. click OK. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. under Template file. click Restore Defaults. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 24 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. click Browse. you modify snap settings. 20 Under Settings. click Training Files. 18 Click ➤ Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Edit. 19 In the Options dialog. and enter 1 . You can turn snap settings on and off. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. In this exercise. click Close.17 In the Spelling dialog.

TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. such as ZO to zoom out. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.7 Under Object Snaps. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. If it does not. 10 On the Options Bar. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. deselect Chain. and move the cursor to the right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. If you do not have a wheel button. click OK. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. While sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom out until it does so. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.

When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the midpoint. 26 Close the file. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and the wall edges. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. with or without saving it. and delete the value 1’ . 25 Click OK. If you move the cursor along the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward.. and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

This system consists of a cooling tower. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. methodology. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. If the tutorial training files are not present. After applying a color scheme to the zones. However. go to http://www. you first plan the system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. As you create the mechanical system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.autodesk. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. and then you create a plenum level. 45 . you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. After finishing each exercise. At the end of the tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). you can choose to save your work. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first configure the linked architectural model.

Next. roof. under Constraints. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. NOTE When working with a linked file. ceilings. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Room Bounding. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. click to select it. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. not in the MEP training file. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In this section. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. click Training Files. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you add a level for plenums. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.Space Plan is highlighted.

MEP. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). verify that only Floor Plan is selected.6 In the Project Browser. Click Plan View Types. and click OK. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 9 On the Draw panel. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 8'. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. The new level is placed. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Preparing Spaces | 47 . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and double-click West . Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 16 Press Esc. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and in the Plan View Types dialog.

you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and then place spaces in various types of areas. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum Plan. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In the next exercise. In this exercise. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Under Extents. you place spaces in areas of the building model. ■ Click OK twice. and click Apply Default View Template. For Cut plane. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 1' 0". for Top. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and click Properties. and for Offset. select MEP . 20 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Level. for Default View Template.Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Sub-Discipline. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Under Identity Data. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. For View Classification. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In this exercise. select Design. However. for View Range. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. click Edit. for View Scale. Under View Depth. you can choose to save your work. select Level Above (Level 3). Notice that the site plan displays in the view.

For Offset. walls. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. enter 0. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. select Level 2 Plenum. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.rvt. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For (Tag Location). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select New. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select Horizontal. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings).Space Plan is highlighted. For Space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.

enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 In the drawing area. for Number. ensuring coordination between the files. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). For Name. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter 219.

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. enter 0. For Offset. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. Placing Spaces | 51 . demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Upper Limit. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line.

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. enter 0. and then press Esc. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. for Upper Limit. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files.rvt. and for Offset. select Level 3. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.

double-click the space name. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the floor plan. which was numbered 219Q. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.7 In the Project Browser. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. as shown. 11 Close the schedule view. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. In the schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. enter Corridor. 10 Using the same method. change the space number to 216A. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and press Enter. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .

Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.Space Plan is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. If necessary.rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.

select Interior and Reference. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.4 Press Esc. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 225PC. enter Chase. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. On the Options Bar. 6 Enter VG. expand Spaces. For Offset. and click Element Properties. for Name. select Roof Level. click in the chase area to place the space. For Limit Offset. 10 In the plan view. and then click OK. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Upper Limit. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Under Identity Data. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. For Number. In the plan view. select Level 3. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Upper Limit. enter 4'. select the space. 12 Click in the section view. enter 0. right-click.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.Space Plan. floors. 15 Press Esc. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. ceilings. and click OK. and maximize the view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Bounding elements (such as walls. under Loaded Tags. select Space Tag With Volume. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. All spaces in the view are tagged. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 17 Type ZF. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next exercises. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.Zoning is highlighted. under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In this exercise. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. click Reference. To display space reference lines. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 .

The graphic in the System Browser updates. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 4 In the drawing area. and click Finish Editing Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that the space is occupiable. double-click 121 Cafeteria. under Energy Analysis. As you do this. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. The Zone tool is active. Next. select Computer Lab 222. Using the Edit Zone tab.5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to zones in the building. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. the Edit Zone tab displays. you can add or remove a space from the zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. and click OK. and modify the zone properties. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and a new zone is created. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Occupiable. Instruction 221.Zoning is highlighted. and Electrical 220 spaces. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. under Spaces. you assign spaces to a zone.

and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.In the System Browser. Instruction. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Expand HVAC Zones. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. type VG. 5 With the drawing area active.

Zoning is highlighted. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Finish Editing Zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Zoning.Area B. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.rvt. To display space reference lines. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 11 Close the System Browser.West . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference.West . expand 2 . enter 2 . and click OK. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 In the System Browser. for Name. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. You activated zone visibility in the views. under Identity Data. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning floor plan. Select Attached End. 8 In the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 15 Press Esc. zoom out. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning view to activate it.5 Click in the Level 1 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

click Training Files. click the corner where the Top. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and click OK. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and zone information. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. on the ViewCube. double-click Level 1 . In this exercise. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. space.Zoning view.rvt. double-click the zone tag. enter Lounge . you verify the building. Front. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.East. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.Zoning to make it the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. for Name Value.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Click (Highlight). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. click (Isolate). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. With 109 Lounge selected. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. verify that Wireframe is selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge.

All spaces in the zone display in isolation. select 109 Lounge. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. ■ ■ ■ Next. click . Below the list of spaces and zones. For Construction Type. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select 1_South_Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and click OK. For People. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.■ On the Details tab. and then click OK. For Electrical Loads. select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. scroll down in the left pane. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . the space information displays for the selected space. and in the People dialog. Next.

00 °F : 54. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that 70. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and dehumidification set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Next. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : N/A is specified. and humidification set point. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the heating set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. cooling air temperature. roofs. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.00 °F : 90. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. For Heating Information. floors. click (Shading). outdoor air per area. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and other room-bounding components. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. For Cooling Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and air changes per hour. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.00 °F : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that 74. heating air temperature.

enter 0. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. 15 In the Project Browser. select Level 3. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. open MEP . For Offset. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Because this is an unoccupied space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Click OK. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. For Name. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Cancel. enter 212P. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Number. Modify space properties 19 Select the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

you verified building. for Energy Data. enter 03101. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. click in the Value field. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and select space Plenum 212P. For Postal Code. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. under Energy Analysis. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.Space Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. On the Place tab. for City. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.rvt. double-click Level 2 . For Location. select School or University. space. NH. is selected. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . click Edit. and zone information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and verify that the space has replaced the void. verify that Manchester. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .

and click OK. For Export Complexity. for Building Service. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. a cooling load. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. for Values. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Ground Plane. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Building Construction. click Edit. this option adjusts the times automatically. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select space Library 219. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Space Type. and then click . For People. verify that Level 1 is selected. select Specified. and click OK. right-click. ■ On the Weather tab. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Latent. click in the Value column. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Sensible. enter 200 Btu/h. and click OK. verify that 1' 0" is specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and enter 50 sq. For Condition Type. enter 150 Btu/h. 8 In the drawing area. you need to select this option. verify that <Building> is specified. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For Project Phase. Under Heat Gain (per Person). under Volume Computations. For Sliver Space Tolerance. Select Area per person. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Specified. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. or neither. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Heated and cooled. for Values. Click OK twice. both. If. verify that New Construction is selected. In order to select a space. select Library . and click Element Properties. ft.Audio Visual.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Electrical Loads. There should be no warnings displayed. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Actual. click Calculate. and under Heating Information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You have verified the building information. click Information). 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. for Values. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that Manchester. For Location. click Edit.■ ■ ■ Click OK. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. NH. Under Power. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and can be modified here. 12 Click the Details tab. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . For Building Service. For Building Construction. for Values. You should correct the space error in the building model. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Click OK twice. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library. Select the space associated with the warning. and click OK. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. select Actual. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. verify that <Building> is specified. Next. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. is specified. verify that School or University is selected. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis.

review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. For Color Scheme. space. 3 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 15 Review the loads report for project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 After you review the loads report. select 219 Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library.Space Plan. weather. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. space. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . or zone information. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. select HVAC Zones. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. click to the right of the building to place the legend.rvt. 17 In the loads report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 21 Click OK. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and a loads report displays. and zone information for the building model. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. click Training Files. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. or make any changes to the model. 19 In the drawing area. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.

under Schemes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. in 1-ton increments. and click OK. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.5 Zoom in to the legend. select Tonnage Range. select the color scheme legend.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

for Select available fields from. select New Construction. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . For Phase. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Select Schedule building components. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.rvt. Click OK. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.12 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Name. more category options are available. In this exercise. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule.Space Fill is the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. select Spaces. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.

select Not Between.■ Under Available fields. select Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Fields dialog. Select Ascending. For Then by. ■ Click Calculated Value. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Type. Header. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Discipline. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Air Flow. For Fields. Select Formula. enter Airflow Delta. for Formula. click (Browse). select Airflow Delta. Click OK. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. In the Calculated Value dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Level. and Blank line. select Number. and then click . select HVAC.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Level. For Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click Conditional Format. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and then select Hidden field.

■ The schedule displays. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. For Background Color. In the Color dialog. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select red. In this exercise. Click OK twice. click the color swatch. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the next lesson. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. right-click to access schedule properties. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. verify that Show is highlighted. a view opens that contains the selected space. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. Under Conditions to Use. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ ■ For Value. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and click OK.

78 .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will create supply air systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. In this lesson. After system creation. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 . IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. As you place the air terminals. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. you modify air terminal parameters.

HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the space crossing lines display. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and scroll to space 223.

18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. select the diffuser. and press Enter. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. Also. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 425 CFM. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 17 Move the cursor down. click Place on Face. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. which in this case is the ceiling grid. the hosted elements are updated as well. type 12. for Flow. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 13 On the Options Bar.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and press Enter.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and then press Esc to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel. as shown. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. verify that Constrain is cleared. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.Rectangular Face Round Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. and select Supply Diffuser .

and click Open. As you place the return diffusers. as shown. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Place on Face. 25 In the drawing area. 28 On the Placement tab. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 22 In the drawing area. 24 In the Open dialog. and then press Esc. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Yes.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. Next.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. select one of the diffusers.rfa. clear Leader. 29 Place 2 diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 27 Select Return Diffuser . you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. click Yes. and click to select the lines. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. as shown. under Other. and click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Strong Reference. for Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select one of the return diffusers.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

44 Zoom in to space 115. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . ■ ■ For the end point. enter 9' 0"2750. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. click the Level 1 line. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space. However. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.HVAC Plan . you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . including energy analysis. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating the logical connection. and click View ➤ Systems.Design is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Press Esc. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. click Training Files. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. right-click the title. In this exercise. You then create the logical connection between the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.rvt. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. On the Options Bar. System Name. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and Flow value. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. the number of elements is updated. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. review the Number of Elements. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 15 Click Cancel. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. As you add diffusers to systems. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Connect Into. 12 In the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. and the system connects them. 22 Click OK. In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. which updates the name in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 26 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. under Identity Data. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 25 Click OK. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the air terminals are the children.17 Using the method learned previously. 18 Click OK. under Mechanical. In this exercise. Rename the system Next. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for Mark. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties.

select Network. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. for Solution Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 4 In the drawing area. select the upper left diffuser. which provides various layout tools. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design is highlighted. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. click Training Files. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Also. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In this case.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Network type provides several solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. and display solution 1. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). A Generate Layout tab displays. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.HVAC Plan. 5 On the Options Bar.

For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Select Branch. enter 9' 10 1/2". 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. as shown. For Flex Duct Type. click Modify. Click OK. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type.Round. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. click Settings. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 3'. For Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Offset. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Offset. you’ll get an error in a later step.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .11 Click Finish Layout. For example. as is the elbow itself. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the duct. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.

14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select By View. and then click OK. a disconnection exists. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. fittings. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.Flow. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. select Duct Color Fill .NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. If the entire network does not highlight. The first time you press Tab. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. for Values Displayed. and equipment. for Color Scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click OK. Using a flow-based color scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. under Graphics. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. but not all values are used in this view. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Usually. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. and click to select it.

26 Click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and click OK. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.Velocity. and on the Options Bar. for Schemes. 20 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select one of the diffusers in the system. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Flow. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). and press Enter. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. under Mechanical . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. select Duct Color Fill . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select the WSHP. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.

Click OK. for Branch Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and then click to select it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Under Constraints. Select Only. and select 16". 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and drag it to the right. click Cancel. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.08 in-wg/100ft. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Friction. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select Calculated Size Only. Select Restrict Height. and enter .

The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. static pressure. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Use the information that displays (flow. Using this tool. pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

NOTE As you inspect a system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . also known as the critical path. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.

and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . indicating that it’s the active view. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the WSHP. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .

for Offset. double-click MEP . 14 In the Project Browser. select 9' 10 1/2". Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. Front. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.3D MEP. NOTE When drawing duct. click the corner where the Top. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 15 On the ViewCube. and click Draw Duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. right-click the connector grip.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. select the top right diffuser.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . it is considered a closed loop. Also. in space 115.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 22 Using the same method. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. the color fill indicates the flow value. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 19 In the drawing area.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select the top left diffuser.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 30 Press Esc twice. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. and click to select it.

Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Constraints.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. such as a plenum. 40 Using the same method. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and then click OK. and click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. for Flow.Airflow. select a segment of the main duct.

Create return and supply piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. In this lesson. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Then.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. 109 . You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you place mechanical equipment.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.rvt. on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. click Training Files.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted.Horizontal . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Left Return . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select WSHP . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .HVAC Plan . in corridor 328. as shown. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Wall faces is selected.2-6 Tons .High Efficiency .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.

click the top edge of the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. and enter 2'. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and click to place the dimension.

and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Water Flow. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. enter 9'. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.14 Click Modify. as shown. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Offset. Click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. select the 2 WSHPs. enter 12 GPM.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. including flow and pressure.

4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. but without a corresponding system. Unlike logical connections (systems).HVAC Plan .Mech 330). 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Design is highlighted. You can create pipes to connect system components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click the Systems column heading. where it is easier to review the information. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.rvt. analyses cannot be performed. 5 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Notice that on the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. select the 2 WSHPs. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 12 In the drawing area. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the boiler. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.In the System Browser. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Assigning a system component to an existing system. As you assign equipment to systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. and the Edit System tool is not active. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. while pressing Ctrl. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Therefore. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design ➤ Floor Plans.13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. double-click Roof . 17 On the Options Bar.Design. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Creating a Piping System | 117 . and select the cooling tower. for System Name. under Design ➤ HVAC .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.HVAC Plan . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and bypasses the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click OK. 25 Select the boiler. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Close the roof plan view. indicating the logical connection. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 28 Using the same method. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. In cooling mode. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Expand All. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click Select. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In heating mode. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.

and click Properties. enter 18 GPM. 32 In the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you can view several parameters. and click Column Settings. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . for Water Flow. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required.In the System Browser. under Mechanical. and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. expand Piping. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.

5 In the Filter dialog. you can place the cursor over a system component. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click to select it. indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 10 Click OK.rvt. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. the boiler. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. then the Select a System dialog displays. select Mechanical Equipment. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWR. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design is highlighted. press Tab to highlight the system. click Check None. click Training Files. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). When you draw a box to select components. and click OK. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 9 In the Select a System dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Mech 330). A system preview displays in red.

It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. click Settings. select Perimeter. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 13 Click Cancel. enter 1' 6''. For Inset. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. duct. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .

Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and the flow for the other is 12. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. With each Tab. the flow for one WSHP is 18. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and press Tab 3 times. to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 17 Optionally.

verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 24 Press Esc.

you physically close the CHWR loop.Design. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.HVAC Plan . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Level 1 . click Edit System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).Design ➤ Floor Plans. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Logically. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Number of Elements is now 8. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Next. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel.

and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. 38 Using the same method. access its instance properties. and click Cancel. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. under Mechanical. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. select a WSHP. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. as shown. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.

For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 41 Click OK. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 1' 6''. For Slope. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.40 In the Select a System dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and then click OK. enter 0''/12''. select CHWS. Click Settings.

as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 48 While pressing Ctrl.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. In a later exercise. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. or manually modify the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). To create the piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.50 Using the same method. select a different layout solution. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Add piping to close the supply loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Click Finish Layout.

and the return pipes are magenta. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D HVAC Building. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. as shown. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view.

■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view.

132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The connections are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the boiler. and the lower one is secondary. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 12 In the 3D view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view. 11 In the Select Connector dialog.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the return pipe riser. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

enter 1' . enter 2'. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.7''. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . for Offset. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ Move the cursor down. and you select 1 connector.In a plan view. and press Enter. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and select it.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. as shown. 19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together. 18 Press Esc twice. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.

26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 28 Press Esc. and click to draw the pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. you select the tee fitting. and when the connector point displays. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 29 If necessary. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click the minus symbol.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. 33 Press Esc.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. type 1'.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. for Offset. enter 9' 6''.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. right-click. you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Next. and click Element Properties.

select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. as shown. for Cooling Water Flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.50 or 50% of the Flow. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. the value is 0 GPM. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. right-click. When you create the pumps in parallel. 46 Press Esc. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties. notice that under Mechanical. 48 In the plan view. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. Connect the cooling tower Next. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 44 In the 3D view. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 42 Click OK. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the cooling tower. 43 Press Esc. under Mechanical. and click OK. view the properties for the secondary pump. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. When the valve is open.50 In the 3D View.rvt. and close the dialog. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

as shown. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 143 . The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Ball Valve .Design is highlighted.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. parallel to the previously placed valve.10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve .

2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Valves | 145 . and select Ball Valve . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). verify that Flow is 0 GPM. under Mechanical. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. In heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 20 Select the bypass valve. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 19 Using the same method. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. and click OK. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

In the left pane of the Open dialog.22 Using the method you just learned.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Initially.Design is highlighted. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.rvt. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

and click OK. for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size. click Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 . select Pipe Color Fill . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.Flow. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.

IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and enter 2. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. for Branch Sizing. 13 Press Esc. Click OK. and click to select the branch. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.25 FT/100ft. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select And. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and for Velocity. Under Constraints. enter 5 FPS. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.

rvt. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Using the System Inspector. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Either relocate the system components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. click Training Files. or manually modify the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System | 149 . select a different layout solution. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. pressure. or offset elevations are incorrect. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. This information helps you modify the system design. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. An inspection flag reports the section number.

10 Click Finish.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. as shown. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 9 Using the same method. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.89 psi. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.88 psi. the Static Pressure is 7. you need to validate them. select 90° F. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. inspect Section 6 again. and the Pressure Loss is 1. and click OK.67 psi. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and to size pipe.

Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. After you assign components to a system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the System Browser. and click View. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click Show to view all of the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. right-click the Systems titlebar. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system.HVAC Plan . Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. the pipe is associated with that system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.Design. As you learned when placing components. 9 Right-click CHWS. 7 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. After you have assigned all components to systems.rvt. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. double-click Level 1 . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For example. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. thus assigning the components to a system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. and double-click Level 3 . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Warnings display. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and for pipe sizing. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.

you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and confirm unassigned system components. otherwise. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click CHWR. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 10 Using the same methods.HVAC Plan . 12 In the System Browser.TIP If you have multiple views open.Design floor plan. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . click Close. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and select Level 3 . right-click Hydronic Return. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 75. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and demand factors that are applied in the design. expand Wiring . Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. distribution systems. For Material. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Select Correction Factor. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 1. wiring.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Copper.04. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature Rating. select Copper. enter THHN. As you place components and create circuits. click (Open). ■ Click New Correction Factor.Wire Sizes. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . You also add a wiring type. Click OK. ■ ■ For Material.rvt. select Wiring Types. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ For Factor. For Temperature. select 90. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

for Custom Colors. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. Click OK three times. Click Background Color. select Red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc.

you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Then. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Use the System Browser to check your design. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 167 . These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create power loads. power circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson.

then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. By using orange as the color for this range. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select the color for Less Than 20. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for the Spaces Category. select the color legend. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. In the Color dialog. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Basic Colors. Under Scheme Definition. select Orange. You can create additional color schemes.rvt.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.00 fc. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Average Estimated Illumination. click (Open).00 fc.

17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.5 fc range is satisfied. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The red field will clear once the +/. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .5 fc range. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.Lighting Ceiling plan.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. zoom to space Library 219. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.277. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 8 In the Project Browser. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. which is the lowest value in the specified range.7 In the Project Browser. 13 Click the Level 2 . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .

the fixtures will move accordingly. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. select Multiple. 23 Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 28 In the drawing area. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple. 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 27 Press ESC to end the command.

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click Check None. and for Category. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . select Lighting Fixtures.277V. Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. 42 In the drawing area. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns.

In the next exercise.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .45 Press ESC to end the command.

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Color Fill plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .

for Apparent Load. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Intensity. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. specify 15000.93. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.00 lm. enter F15. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. click the value for Initial Color. for Color Preset. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.85. select Xenon and click OK. ■ Click Apply.ies and click Open.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter . select T5 [HO]. Click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. In the Select File dialog. for Lamp. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ Click OK twice. enter 162.00 VA. Under Photometrics. In the Name dialog. select 463T5_S. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Electrical. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. and click OK. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Type Mark.277V and click OK.

277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. click Check None. Click OK. and for Category. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you add switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click (Open). The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. In the next exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing Switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and Receptacles | 183 .Press Delete. and receptacles to your design. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. junction boxes.rvt. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V.

Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and click Open. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Select Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. The element type Junction Boxes .

note the Number of Poles is 1. for Level 2 . 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL. Click Edit Type. 15 Select the junction box. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark. NOTE When entering values. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Under Electrical. In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK twice. enter 9’0”. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.14 Press ESC to end the command.

expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage. NOTE If necessary. and Number of Elements. Select Size.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Junction Boxes. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 23 In the System Browser. Distribution System. 26 In the System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 24 For any column. Click OK. Expand General. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand Electrical. Placing Switches. Space Number. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Space Name. right-click and click Column Settings. Select Load.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

and Receptacles | 189 . 38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar.

move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

48 Close the file with or without saving it. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

click Training Files. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.equipment. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to the space Electrical 220.rvt. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and work toward the higher voltage. Adding wiring to a project is optional. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.

For Panel Name. enter PP-2B. enter 20. for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select 120/208 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.Surface: 100A. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. #1 Pole Breakers. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

Click OK.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. and for Category. enter 20. Click OK. enter LP-2B. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. zoom to space Instruction 221. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. 20 In the drawing area. 23 In the Filter dialog. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. For Panel Name. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

Click OK. click Check None. enter 2. except without wire. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Wires. Click OK. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 41 In the Filter dialog. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Hot Conductors. and for Category. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. click (Open). Next you create circuits without showing wire. 38 Press ESC to end the command.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.Loads.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. expand Power.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. right-click on the Systems heading. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Click OK. and verify that Load. 13 In the System Browser. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.rvt. Expand Electrical. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Distribution System. and Voltage Drop are selected. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Rating. 2 In the drawing area. Voltage.

18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. under Electrical. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 22 With the junction box still selected. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 30 Close the System Browser. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Click OK.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area.

43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. click Edit Type. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 35 Press ESC to end the command. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 47 In the drawing area. Click Tags. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. click below the first one to place it. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click Yes. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. for Type Mark. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 40 Click OK twice. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Identity Data. enter FR4. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .

204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 52 In the Save As dialog. and click Apply. select Break. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Check None.rfa. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 56 In the Filter dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Lighting Fixture Tags. for File Name. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Click OK. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. For Circuit Number. Deselect Break and for Suffix.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. Click Save. Next you create a switch system. enter a comma. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .

for Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. click (Open). 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Training Files. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. enter a. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Creating a Switch System | 205 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.

22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.Lighting. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. for switch ID. under Electrical . Click OK. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter b.

Circuits are used for power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and for Category. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. lighting. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the PP-2B panel. click (Open).rvt. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Check None. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Click OK. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Power Loads | 207 .26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. click Training Files. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures.

and in the drawing area. select Wiring. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.Loads. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 19 Click OK.rfa. select Long Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 2. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 13 Select the wire again. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click Element Properties. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. for Hot Conductors. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click Open.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click to select the circuit. 22 In space Electrical 220.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. click the connector of the first receptacle. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 2 In the drawing area. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Next you balance the loads for your design. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.rvt. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 3 In the Electrical space. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. select panel LP-2B. zoom to space Electrical 220. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Open. Finally. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 .on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.

11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Click OK. 14 Close the warning dialog. Scroll down. and Phase C . 1-#10. Notice that the loads on Phase A. for Rating. 1-#10. 6 Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#12. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 1-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.3712 VA. B. enter 30A. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.3616 VA). The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Rebalance Loads.

24 Select the transformer TP-2B.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. for Rating. and click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click (Open). Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Next you create a panel schedule. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and click OK. under Electrical . click Training Files. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. enter 25A. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Select PP-2B. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 30A. under Electrical . Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.15 Select panel PP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click OK. for Rating.

enter 1/8. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. under Other. click Training Files. select Berlin Sans FB. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.Panel Schedules. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). 6 In the Project Browser. and open E601 . Under Header Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Under Body Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 4 Close the report.rvt. click Edit. expand Sheets (all). 11 Click OK twice. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font Size. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 3/32. for Font Size. Under Header Text. 7 Select the schedule. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 5 In the Project Browser. select Bold and Italic. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Appearance.

Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. select space Lounge 212. In the System Browser. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Unassigned. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. each with a load of 180VA. In the System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

16 Close the details dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. for Panel. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 20 On the Options Bar.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the Project Browser. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Duplicate. you create a PVC pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Plumbing Plan . and click OK. 4 In the Name dialog.Design is open. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.rvt. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . type PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 219 . Adding a pipe size. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and click Properties.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Vent. right-click PVC . In this lesson. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 13 In the right panel. click Pipe Settings.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV: Standard. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 25 For Outside. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. under Pipe Types. 24 For Inside Diameter.DWV: Standard. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 26 Click OK.PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Tap. select Tee Vent . 6 Click OK.Sch 40 . for Material. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. click Modify. select Tee. select Branch. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .DWV. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Sanitary. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. In the Project Browser. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. PVC . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. click Training Files. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. enter 1/2''. 10 On the Selection panel. 27 For the new pipe size.0''.PVC . Cross. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 17 In the left pane. enter 10°. and click OK.PVC . enter -4' . Tee. select Plastic.rfa. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select None.Vent is listed. and click Main. 18 For System Type. enter 5/8''. under Mechanical. 15 For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 22 Click New Size. 21 In the right pane.Sch 40 . enter 27/32''. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. for Nominal.

Create the cold water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. and hot and cold water piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent. Create the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number. you add 2 toilets. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 1 urinal.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. including the men’s room (space Male 107). move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.

in the Type Selector. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.1. select Public . under Water Closet . as shown.Flush Valve . 5 On the Placement panel. and 3 sinks.Wall Mounted. 1 wall-mounted urinal. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.6 gpf. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 4 On the Element panel. against the left wall. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

select 3/4'' Flush Valve. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. and press Esc. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space.) 8 Press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture.7 Click to place another toilet. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.Wall Hung. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. (Again. zoom in closer.

13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel. In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.Rectangular. click Place on Face.2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 14 Click Modify.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. In this exercise. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. a urinal. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and click View ➤ Piping. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and review the components listed under this system. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and Default Domestic Cold Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. clear Lines (<Overhead>). and verify that Level 1 . 6 In the plan view. 8 In the Filter dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design ➤ Floor Plans. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Design is open. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and click OK. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. If you deselected the drain. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 On the Edit System panel. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. 13 In the Systems Browser. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. You include the bathroom space number in the name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. so the Create Sanitary System is available.

The base is placed. at the midpoint of the detail lines. a toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 16 In the Select a System dialog. for example. and click OK. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. A preview of the piping layout displays. select one of the components in the system. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter -1' 0''. and modify it to meet project requirements. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Intersections. for Offset. enter -4'-0”. select Branch. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click OK. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 24 In the left pane. select Main. enter -1' 0''. 27 Click Modify.19 On the Options Bar. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 21 On Options Bar. and for Offset. click Solutions. The default settings are automatically modified. for Solution Type. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 25 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select 4''. for Slope. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Diameter. 23 For Offset. You accept this suggested solution. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room.

and verify that Level 1 . 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Rectangular. select 22''x22'' . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.Plumbing Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Public. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Lavatory .rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.

8 Select the sink.7 Click Modify. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink. For example. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. TIP When entering dimensions. select Multiple. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Add To System. click Finish Editing System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 16 On the Edit System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 12 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

21 Select the tee. 19 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the fitting. with the tee fitting selected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. double-click 3D Plumbing.In the System Browser. 22 In the plan view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Design ➤ 3D Views. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. In this example. press Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. When you press the Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .6''. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Slope. and click to draw the pipe. enter 2' .

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard.PVC . 32 Select the double wye fitting. 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays.Sch 40 . under Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting.DWV. 29 In the Type Selector.

zoom in to the double wye fitting. 37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar. enter 1'. right-click the right connector. and press Enter. 36 In the section view. double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 34 Press Esc. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. for Offset.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify.

244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and press Esc. 46 In the section view. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. press Spacebar. 47 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify.

under Trap P . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 53 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 51 In the Type Selector. 54 Click Modify.PVC . select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.DWV. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.Sch 40 . 52 In the plan view. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left.

and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and press Enter..57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. select the left P-Trap. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. enter 6''. In the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. as shown. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. In the Type Selector. and select a proposed solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. Press Esc. under Pipe Types. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl.

click Finish. adjusting the sanitary stack. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.rvt. click Training Files. for Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.

Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and click the intersection to place the fitting. click Modify. and click to draw the pipe. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Overall. 5 Select the tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Floor level line. right-click the top connector.PVC . select the elbow fitting on the right. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view.DWV. 9 In the Type Selector. as shown. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 7 On the Selection panel.Sch 40 .Plumbing Plan .Design. and click Draw Pipe. select Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select the vertical stack. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design. 3 In the Section view. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

11 Click Modify. for Offset. 17 In the Type Selector. select Standard. 12 Select the fitting.DWV.Sch 40 . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. as shown. enter 1'-0”. 15 Press Esc. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Click the rotate control once. under Plug . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 18 In the plan view. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.rvt. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan .Design is open.19 Click Modify.Design ➤ Floor Plans. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. and verify that Level 1 .

5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for System Type. For Offset. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and click Main.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Overall. select Plumbing Fixtures.Design ➤ 3D Views. select Branch. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Main. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. if necessary. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. enter 9' 3''. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. minimize the Sanitary system. select Branch. urinal. for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. draw a selection box to select the toilets. click Check None. expand Unassigned. double-click 3D Plumbing . 15 In the plan view. and click OK. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 9 In the left pane.) 10 Click OK. and sinks. and for System Type.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 14 In the System Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 In the right pane. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . For Offset. select Domestic Cold Water. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 6 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: Water. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 7 In the left pane. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system.

select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 19 On the System Tools panel. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. In the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 21 On the Edit System panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. For Flow Conversion Method. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . enter DCW 107. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Notice that the water main displays in blue. click Edit System.

at the intersection of the water main pipe. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. For Offset. and click to place the pipe. for Offset. 35 In the Type Selector. as shown. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 3' . verify that Automatically Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. right-click the top DCW connector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. select the sink above the urinal. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. and press Enter. enter 0”/12”. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. under Pipe Types. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter.2 7/8''. 37 On the Options Bar. select Water. 34 In the plan view. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor to the right. connect the second toilet. 33 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 7''. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 30 In the plan view. enter 10'. enter 4'0”. select 3/4''. For Slope. click to the left of the urinal. and press Enter. and click the connector.25 Using the same method. as shown.

41 Select the top sink. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click OK. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click to connect to the main cold water line.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. you create the hot water system.

and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. while pressing Ctrl. 2 In the Project Browser. select the 3 sinks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view. and verify that Level 1 . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .

in the Unassigned folder. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. In later steps. you edit the system to add equipment. under Water Heater . 10 In the System Browser. 12 In the Type Selector. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. select 0.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Domestic Hot Water. 14 Click Modify. and click OK. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 15 In the System Browser. and click Edit System. Default Domestic Cold Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.6 Gallon.Tankless. for System Name. verify that DCW 107 is selected. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 13 In the plan view. When designing systems. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

and on the Edit System panel. Slope: 0''/12''. 24 Move the cursor up. for Offset. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. 19 Select the water heater. select the water heater. 27 Click Modify. 25 On the Options Bar.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. enter 10’. click Finish Editing System. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. and select Draw Pipe. Offset: 4' 6''. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 22 In the Type Selector. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. enter 1' 6''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. and click the water main line. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 .

click Automatically Connect to switch it off. enter 1' 6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 9' 0''. for Diameter. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). select a sink. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 35 On the Options Bar. and in the System Selector. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. select Domestic Hot Water 107.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 30 On the System Tools panel. and on the Placement Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 33 On the Edit System panel. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 37 On the Options Bar. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Finish Editing System. 36 Move the cursor down. select 4'-6''. enter 1''. as shown. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and for Offset. and press Enter. click Edit System.

and press Enter. enter 2' 8''. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. as shown. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you can choose to save your work. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. 2 Right-click Standard. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. click Training Files. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 267 . In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You create a new pipe type.rvt. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.autodesk. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and click Duplicate. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this lesson. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

or architectural components. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. However. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. under Mechanical. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. and click Properties. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Offset. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. structural beams. click Rename. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. duct. for Material. select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. select Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. verify that 9' 0" is specified. In the next exercise. In the left pane. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is selected. select Main. In this exercise. For Offset. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Carbon Steel. 6 In the Project Browser. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For System Type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 9 Click OK. Next. For Pipe Type. and enter Fire Protection Wet.

2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Fire Protection Plan . select Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select the upper half of the building. click Add.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Under Categories. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Name. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files. 5 Click OK twice. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 1. For Group parameter under.Design is highlighted. enter Sprinkler Zone. the space crossing lines display. 8 Using a crossing window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. under Fire Protection. and click Element Properties. right-click. 6 In the drawing area.

including a calculated value parameter. and click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 10 In the Filter dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then access instance properties. to which you add various parameters. 13 Using the same method. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. select Zone 1. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Zone 2.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. under Fire Protection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone.

The schedule displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Fire Protection. For Name.Fire Protection Plan . select Feet and fractional inches. For Type of Parameter. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. indicating that it’s the active view. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Units. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. 11 Click OK twice. select To the nearest 1'. In the Maximum Spacing column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. double-click on each column separator. click the Formatting tab. For Rounding. 6 Using the same method. for Name. select Spaces. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Maximum Spacing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Length. enter 15. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 9 On the Formatting tab.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Schedule keys. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 Select the new header. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and on the ribbon. For Key name. and click Field Format. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. 7 Click OK. For Group parameter under. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Click OK. click Add Parameter. enter Light.

16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. under Available fields.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. Click OK. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. For Name. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter 130. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Extra.

This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and click OK. For Discipline. For Units. for Sort by. and click View Properties. under Other. For Rounding. For Then by. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Select Header and Blank line. Click OK. select Common. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 19 Click the Formatting tab. In the Fields dialog. 22 Click OK twice. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Fixed. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select 0 decimal place. click . The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Number. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Level. select Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Sprinkler Zone.

select Level equals Level 2. and then click Field Format. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and select Totals only. right-click the schedule. select Number. for Filter. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK 3 times.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Minimum Sprinklers. ■ In the Format dialog. Under Field formatting. and click View Properties. At the bottom of the dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. for Filter by. select Grand totals. For Fields. 30 Click OK twice. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. For Fields. select Hidden field. and then select Hidden field. For Then by (second instance). verify that Use default settings is selected. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. double-click Type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Totals only. under Other. select Calculate totals. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. System Name. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. For Category. and Count. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and click View Properties. delete the word Maximum. select Grand totals. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Sprinklers. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Fields. select Count.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group.

As a result. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 43 Click Cancel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select space 221 Instruction.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and access the instance properties. select Light. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 41 In the plan view. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 Click OK. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Unobstructed. double-click FP . 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 48 In the floor plan. 46 With the space still selected. and click OK. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. but their values are not determined. 50 Access the instance properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. Unobstructed.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. However. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.rvt. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 279 . methodology. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. As you create the system.autodesk. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By following the recommended workflow. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you place the sprinklers. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and double-click Level 2 . After finishing each exercise. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you can choose to save your work.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment. After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.

10 Press Esc twice. while pressing Ctrl. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.Pendent . select the sprinklers that you placed. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler . 11 In the drawing area. as shown. 9 In space Instruction 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.

282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Next. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and then press Esc. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. as shown.

Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.Fire Protection Plan . 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 25 Click OK. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This number is determined in the schedule. and click Element Properties. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.FP_Ceiling view. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Notice that the schedule updates. move the cursor to the right. Next. enter 10' 6". 17 In the Project Browser. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. enter 11. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Design. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. specify a vertical offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. For Number.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and 200C). 29 Press Esc. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 200B. for Offset. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. under Constraints. 19 In the floor plan. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. open Design ➤ FP . 18 Type WT.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 14' 6". you adjust the offset. and press Enter. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.

you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. indicating that it’s the active view. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In this exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.30 Close the file with or without saving it. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. click Training Files.rvt. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.Fire Protection Plan . Unlike logical connections (systems). In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. and with piping (physical connection). you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.Design is highlighted. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. After creating the logical connection.

4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 Right-click the header. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. and select Piping. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. within the Piping Systems folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. click View ➤ Systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . In the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. named Fire Protection Wet. as shown. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems.

providing system editing tools. enter FP Wet_Zone2.Wet is selected. and select the system. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 13 In the System Browser. For Pipe Type. and a piping layout preview displays. 19 Click OK. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 15 In the drawing area. and number of elements in the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. for System Name. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and click Select. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. indicating the logical connection. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 12 On the Options Bar. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . press Tab. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The Edit Piping System panel displays. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and on the Options Bar. click Settings. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 11 With the system still selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. verify that Main is selected. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. In the left pane. select an initial piping layout. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. place the cursor over a sprinkler. system equipment. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Next. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select Branch. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The Generate Layout tools are activated. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears.

Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). enter -12' 0". When the layout is finished. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. select 2". The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Place Base. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Solutions. 23 For Offset. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 22 On the Options Bar.20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. verify that Network is selected. and green represents branch lines). as shown. and select solution 5. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout.

as shown. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 29 Click Finish Layout. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. On the Generate Layout panel.

select a different layout solution.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. the Connect Into tool. Next. or manually modify the pipe. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Either relocate the system components.

and select the elbow fitting as shown. 3 If necessary. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 2 Zoom in. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

for Solution Type. 13 Click Finish Layout. or a system component to display system tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. and select solution 5. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. verify that Network is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 8 In the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. radiators. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. click Add To System. mechanical equipment. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. you can select the pipe or duct. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. air terminals. click Finish Editing System. verify that Solutions is selected. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 12 On the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area.

pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. right-click. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 25 Select the sprinkler. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 28 In the drawing area. and click Draw Pipe. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and then press Esc. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 29 Using the same method. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Piping Plan.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then tile the views. select 9'.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights.

5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.rvt. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale.Design is highlighted. 4 On the Options Bar.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ 6 Press Esc.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4".

and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 26 Using the same method. select 1 1/4". for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. The pipe diameter is modified. as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar.

304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this exercise. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You added tags to pipes. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. For additional practice.

add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.

306 .

click Training Files. and view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Properties. right-click Level 1. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Rename. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. matchlines.rvt. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and apply a view template. and click OK. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 307 . you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. If the view included detail graphics. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Copy of Level 1. dependent views.

right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and then press Esc. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. more focused. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. as shown. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 10 In the drawing area. create dependent views for areas B and C. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply Default View Template. 4 Using the same method.rvt. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. views and put them on the sheet. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view.

Click OK. on the Options Bar. and then press Esc. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click the current value.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 13 Press Esc twice. 21 Using the same method./ ---). 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Pattern. 19 In the drawing area. In the Color dialog. for Target view. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select 11. select Double Dash 5/8". Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select black. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 20 Select the upper view reference and. and click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. For Line Weight.

22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and zoom to each of the view references. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 27 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method. as shown.

2 Zoom in. select Plumbing. right-click 3D Plumbing. For Sub-Discipline.Domestic Water. click Training Files. for View Name. For Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Apply Default View Template.29 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click Plumbing Isometric . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. Under Graphics. select Documentation. select Plumbing Isometric. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Domestic Water. and click to select it. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and select the section box.rvt. The section crop lines no longer display. enter Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . for View Classification. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Properties. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.

and click to select it. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Pattern. 12 Using the same method. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and then click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select Dash. Click Apply. press Tab 3 times.9 Right-click.

14 Right-click. as shown). and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. 18 Using methods learned previously. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. On the View Control Bar.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Right-click. In the drawing area. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.

24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 25 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. as shown. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 315 . verify that Common is selected. and click to place the spot slope annotation. In the Format dialog. for Rounding. 21 Click OK twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. click on the Format value.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. For Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. select To the nearest 1/8". 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you use a plan view to create a callout view.

for Scale. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 5 On the Options Bar.

for Line Weight.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. using the same method. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. double-click M601 . drag it to the sheet. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and select the viewport. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. 26 In the Rename View dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. right-click the detail view. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under Names. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Rename. 25 In the Project Browser. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Typical WSHP Detail. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.

■ work with model-based components. symbols. 321 . linetypes. duct tags. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

rvt. as shown. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. click Training Files. 8 With the text still selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a return diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Creating Annotations | 323 . and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.

navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. clear Leader. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. under Category. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open. 17 Click Modify.rfa. click Load. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. for Ducts. If necessary. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.25 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Leader. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 325 .

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. select Free End. for Leader.33 On the Options Bar. as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area.

That’s because you changed a type property.36 Press Esc twice. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK. not simply an instance property. select the last tag placed. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and lock lighting fixtures. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. for Leader Arrowhead. select Dot Open 1/16". 41 Close the file with or without saving it. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. you use temporary dimensions to locate. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and all elements of that type are affected. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.rvt. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 12 Press Esc. and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar. select the dimension line.

annotation symbols. linework. enter 8'. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Using the same methods. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Creating a Legend | 329 . and offset them 8' from the wall. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and press Enter. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. and notes. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 16 Press Esc.13 Using the same method. Because the dimensions are locked. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.3 1/2"). 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.

Click OK. click below the title to place the diffuser. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ 9 In the drawing area.rvt.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . select 1/4" = 1' -0". 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Using the same method. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.8 Neck. 5 Click in the drawing area. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. For Scale.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. enter Diffuser Legend. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 331 . 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc. 26 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. 21 Press Esc. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP and its text note. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 34 Using the method learned previously.

40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. detail groups. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A detail callout that references another view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting view using detail components.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 335 . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.

113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Next. 5 In the drawing area. and click to place it. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 East on the sheet. 8 Using the same method. 7 Drag the Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser .

and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. right-click. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . 13 Right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. for Title on Sheet. select the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click OK.9 Press Esc.

In the next exercise. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 22 Press Esc. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. 21 Using the drag control. and click Activate View. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. as shown.

113 North view. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). click New. for Name. as shown. enter Electrical Power. As you draw. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the Line Styles dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. for Line Weight. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. expand Lines.rvt. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. click Training Files.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser. notice that there are no snaps active. verify that Chain is selected. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . In the New Subcategory dialog. select 6. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. 8 On the Options Bar.

340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 1/8". for Offset.10 Press Esc. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar.

Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 29 Click Modify. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). as shown. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).

select Multiple. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar.

click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.5. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.36 Press Esc. 40 Press Esc. and press Enter. You enter exact values for each line length. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. enter 0 0. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . for Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.

click on the length dimension value. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. enter 0 0. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select all 3 lines.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. while pressing Ctrl. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Using the same method.25. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. for Name. Press Esc. 47 In the drawing area. enter Ground.125. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and press Enter. and then press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 50 With the group selected. you can ensure that they stay together. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In later exercises.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. for Name. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Rename. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click OK. and will place it on sheet E01. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 2 Right-click the copy. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. and then press Esc. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Walkthroughs. Click OK. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Under Names. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 3D Views. and click Apply View Template. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3D HVAC Iso.

Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Typical. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 15 Using the same method. Move the cursor down and to the left. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. (Right). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and click to specify the second leader point. as shown. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 19 Complete the text labels. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .

as shown. 23 Click on the crop region. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. and under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing .To rotate and reposition a text label. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. 25 Click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

Place a detail component. and click Properties. For Scale. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 3 In the Project Browser. right-click the view name. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 30 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. select the isometric view. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select 3" = 1'-0". and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.29 In the drawing area. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 12 On the Element panel. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Documentation. Click OK. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. click the point at the top of the drain. as the rectangle start point. 9 Zoom in to the component. select Plumbing. for Sub-Discipline. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View Classification.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

select C. 20 Select 1.I. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.P. Concrete. 22 Click Modify. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 23 In the drawing area. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. for Type. select the filled region. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. (Line). 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 18 With the filled region still selected. 21 In the drawing area.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. and then press Esc.

28 Click Modify. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. select Multiple.

39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 45 Using the method learned previously. 40 Click Finish Region. (Rectangle). as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.. select the Flashing Membrane group. for Name. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 52 In the Create Group dialog. as shown.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then click to select them. draw wide detail lines as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain. 49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and click OK. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

as shown. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

62 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. select Leader and Free End. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 64 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. and then click OK. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 71 Click Modify. 72 If necessary. and use the grips to resize the masking region.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and click to specify the text insertion point.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. 90 Press Esc. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 .

Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Layers. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Visible. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. select Black and White. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. click Training Files. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Click Open.rvt. for Line Weight. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For Import units. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.dwg. For Colors. select Auto-Detect. you import a CAD detail drawing. select 3. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK.

11 Press Esc. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Type ZF. select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful